blob: 86967b85dfd07231e9e31032f67388ee6202dc95 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020024#include <net/codel.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020025#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070026
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040027/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070040 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010043 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070047 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070048 */
49
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040050/**
51 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070052 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040053 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040060 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070072 */
73
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020074/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040075 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010089/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
103 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
109 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
110 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
113 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
114 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
115 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
116 * .release_buffered_frames().
117 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
118 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
119 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
120 */
121
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500122struct device;
123
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400124/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200125 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
126 *
127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200129 */
130enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200133};
134
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200135#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
136
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200137/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800138 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
143 */
144enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
145 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
146 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
149};
150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200294 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100302 */
303enum ieee80211_bss_change {
304 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300316 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200328
329 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100330};
331
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300332/*
333 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
334 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
335 * filtering will be disabled.
336 */
337#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
338
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100339/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200340 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
341 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200342 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300343 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300344 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
345 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
346 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700347 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200348enum ieee80211_event_type {
349 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200350 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300351 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300352 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353};
354
355/**
356 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
357 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
359 */
360enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700361 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
362 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
363};
364
365/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200366 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200367 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
368 */
369struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
370 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
371};
372
373/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200374 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
375 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200376 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200377 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
378 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200379 */
380enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
381 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200382 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200383 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
384 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200385};
386
387/**
388 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
389 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
390 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
391 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
394 MLME_SUCCESS,
395 MLME_DENIED,
396 MLME_TIMEOUT,
397};
398
399/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200400 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
402 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
403 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
404 */
405struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
406 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
408 u16 reason;
409};
410
411/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300412 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
413 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
414 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300415 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300416 */
417struct ieee80211_ba_event {
418 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
419 u16 tid;
420 u16 ssn;
421};
422
423/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200425 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200426 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200427 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200430 */
431struct ieee80211_event {
432 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
433 union {
434 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300436 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 } u;
438};
439
440/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200441 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
442 *
443 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
444 *
445 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
446 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
447 */
448struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
449 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
450 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
451};
452
453/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100454 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
455 *
456 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
457 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
458 *
459 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200460 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
461 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530462 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100463 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
464 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200465 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
466 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100467 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200468 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300469 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200470 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100471 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
472 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
473 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
474 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200475 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200476 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
477 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100479 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
480 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
482 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
483 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700484 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800485 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200486 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
487 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
488 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300489 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100490 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200491 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
492 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100493 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
494 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200495 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100496 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300497 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
498 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
499 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200500 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200501 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
502 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
503 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200504 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300505 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
506 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
507 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
508 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100509 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
510 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
511 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200512 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200513 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
514 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
515 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300516 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
517 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200518 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300519 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
520 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200521 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100522 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
523 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
524 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
525 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
526 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
527 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100528 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200529 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
530 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
531 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100532 */
533struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200534 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100535 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200536 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530537 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100538 u16 aid;
539 /* erp related data */
540 bool use_cts_prot;
541 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300542 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200543 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800544 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700545 u16 beacon_int;
546 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200547 u64 sync_tsf;
548 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100549 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100550 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300551 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200552 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200553 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200554 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
555 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100556 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200557 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300558 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100559 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200560 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200561 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300562 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300563 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
564 size_t ssid_len;
565 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200566 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100567 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100568 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200569 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100570};
571
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800572/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200573 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800574 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700575 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800576 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100577 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200578 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
579 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
580 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
581 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
582 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
583 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
584 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
585 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
586 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
587 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
588 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200589 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200590 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
591 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200592 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200593 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
594 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200595 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200596 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200597 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
598 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
599 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
600 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
601 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
602 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
603 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
604 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200605 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
606 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
607 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300608 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
609 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200610 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
611 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
612 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600613 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
614 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
615 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100616 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
617 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
618 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200619 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
620 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200621 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
622 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100623 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
624 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
625 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200626 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
627 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
628 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
629 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100630 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
631 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
632 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100633 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
634 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
635 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200636 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
637 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
638 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400639 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200640 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
641 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100642 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
643 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
644 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
645 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200646 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
647 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
648 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530649 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
650 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
651 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200652 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
653 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
654 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200655 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
656 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530657 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
658 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
659 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200660 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
661 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
662 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530663 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
664 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
665 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
666 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
667 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200668 *
669 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
670 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800671 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200672enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200673 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
677 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
678 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
679 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
680 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
681 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
682 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
683 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
684 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
685 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600686 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100687 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200688 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200689 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100690 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100692 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400695 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200698 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530699 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200700 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530701 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530703 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200704};
705
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200706#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
707
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200708/**
709 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
710 *
711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
712 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530713 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
714 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100715 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100716 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200717 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200718 *
719 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
720 */
721enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
722 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530723 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100724 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100725 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200726 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200727};
728
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200729/*
730 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
731 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
732 */
733#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
734 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
735 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
736 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
737 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100738 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200739 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200740 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200741
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530742/**
743 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
744 * Rate Control algorithm.
745 *
746 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
747 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
748 *
749 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
751 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
752 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100754 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
755 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530756 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
757 * Greenfield mode.
758 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100759 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
760 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
761 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530762 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
763 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
764 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
765 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
766 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200767enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
768 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
769 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
770 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
771
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100772 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200773 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
774 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
775 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
776 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
777 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100778 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
779 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
780 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800781};
782
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200783
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200784/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
785#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200786
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200787/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
788#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
789
790/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200791#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200792
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200793/* maximum number of rate table entries */
794#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
795
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200796/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200797 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200798 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200799 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
800 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200801 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200802 *
803 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
804 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
805 *
806 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
807 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200808 *
809 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
810 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
811 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
812 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300813 * information::
814 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200815 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300816 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200817 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
818 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
819 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
820 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300821 * information should then contain::
822 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200823 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300824 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200825 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
826 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200827 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200828struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
829 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100830 u16 count:5,
831 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000832} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200833
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100834#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
835
836static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
837 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
838{
839 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200840 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
841 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100842}
843
844static inline u8
845ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
846{
847 return rate->idx & 0xF;
848}
849
850static inline u8
851ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
852{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200853 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100854}
855
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200856/**
857 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200858 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200859 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
860 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
861 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
862 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
863 *
864 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200865 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200866 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100867 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700868 * @control: union for control data
869 * @status: union for status data
870 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100871 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700872 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100873 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700874 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200875 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200876 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200877struct ieee80211_tx_info {
878 /* common information */
879 u32 flags;
880 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200881
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200882 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100883
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100884 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100885
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200886 union {
887 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200888 union {
889 /* rate control */
890 struct {
891 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
892 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
893 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200894 u8 use_rts:1;
895 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200896 u8 short_preamble:1;
897 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200898 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200899 };
900 /* only needed before rate control */
901 unsigned long jiffies;
902 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200903 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +0200904 union {
905 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
906 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
907
908 /* When packets are enqueued on txq it's easy
909 * to re-construct the vif pointer. There's no
910 * more space in tx_info so it can be used to
911 * store the necessary enqueue time for packet
912 * sojourn time computation.
913 */
914 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
915 };
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200916 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200917 u32 flags;
918 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200919 } control;
920 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200921 u64 cookie;
922 } ack;
923 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200924 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200925 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200926 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100927 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200928 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300929 u16 tx_time;
930 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200931 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200932 struct {
933 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
934 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200935 u8 pad[4];
936
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200937 void *rate_driver_data[
938 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
939 };
940 void *driver_data[
941 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200942 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700943};
944
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300945/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200946 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
947 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200948 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
949 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
950 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200951 *
952 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
953 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
954 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
955 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
956 */
957struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200958 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
959 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200960 const u8 *common_ies;
961 size_t common_ie_len;
962};
963
964
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200965static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
966{
967 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
968}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400969
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200970static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
971{
972 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
973}
974
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200975/**
976 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
977 *
978 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
979 *
980 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
981 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
982 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
983 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
984 *
985 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
986 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
987 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
988 */
989static inline void
990ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
991{
992 int i;
993
994 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
995 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
996 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
997 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
998 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
999 /* clear the rate counts */
1000 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1001 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1002
1003 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001004 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001005 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1006 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1007 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1008}
1009
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001010
1011/**
1012 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1013 *
1014 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1015 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1016 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1017 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001018 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1019 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001020 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001021 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1022 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001023 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1024 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1025 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1026 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001027 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1028 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001029 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1030 * the frame.
1031 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1032 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001033 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001034 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1035 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1036 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001037 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1038 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1039 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001040 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1041 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +02001042 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001043 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001044 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001045 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1046 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001047 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1048 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001049 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1050 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1051 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001052 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1053 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1054 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001055 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1056 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1057 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1058 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1059 * on this subframe
1060 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1061 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001062 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1063 * done by the hardware
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001064 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001065 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1066 * processing it in any regular way.
1067 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1068 * them for sniffing purposes.
1069 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1070 * monitor interfaces.
1071 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1072 * them for sniffing purposes.
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001073 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001074 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1075 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001076 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1077 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1078 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1079 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1080 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1081 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1082 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1083 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1084 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001085 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1086 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1087 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001088 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1089 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1090 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001091 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1092 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001093 */
1094enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001095 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1096 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001097 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001098 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1099 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1100 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1101 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001102 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001103 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1104 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1105 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1106 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1107 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1108 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1109 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001110 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
Sara Sharonf9cfa5f2015-12-08 16:04:33 +02001111 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001112 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1113 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1114 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1115 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001116 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001117 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001118 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001119 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(24),
1120 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001121 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001122 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1123 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001124 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001125 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001126 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(32),
1127 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT_ULL(33),
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001128 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT_ULL(34),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001129};
1130
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001131#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1132
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001133/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001134 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1135 *
1136 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1137 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1138 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001139 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001140 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001141 */
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001142
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001143enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1144 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001145 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1146 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001147};
1148
1149/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001150 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1151 *
1152 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1153 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001154 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001155 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001156 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1157 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001158 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1159 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001160 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1161 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001162 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001163 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001164 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1165 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001166 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1167 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1168 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001169 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1170 * values were filled.
1171 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1172 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001173 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001174 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001175 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1176 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001177 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1178 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_\*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001179 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001180 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1181 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1182 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001183 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001184struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1185 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001186 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001187 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001188 u32 ampdu_reference;
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001189 u64 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001190 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001191 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001192 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001193 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001194 u8 rx_flags;
1195 u8 band;
1196 u8 antenna;
1197 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001198 u8 chains;
1199 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001200 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001201};
1202
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001203/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001204 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1205 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1206 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1207 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1208 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1209 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1210 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1211 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1212 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1213 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1214 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1215 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1216 * @data field.
1217 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1218 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1219 * length
1220 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1221 *
1222 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1223 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1224 * data.
1225 */
1226struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1227 u32 present;
1228 u8 align;
1229 u8 oui[3];
1230 u8 subns;
1231 u8 pad;
1232 u16 len;
1233 u8 data[];
1234} __packed;
1235
1236/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001237 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1238 *
1239 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1240 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001241 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1242 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1243 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001244 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1245 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1246 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1247 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1248 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1249 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1250 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001251 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1252 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1253 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1254 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1255 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001256 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1257 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001258 */
1259enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001260 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001261 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001262 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001263 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001264};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001265
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001266
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001267/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001268 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1269 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001270 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001271 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001272 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001273 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001274 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001275 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001276 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001277 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001278 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1279 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001280 */
1281enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001282 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001283 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001284 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001285 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001286 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1287 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1288 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001289 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001290};
1291
1292/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001293 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1294 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001295 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1296 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1297 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1298 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1299 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001300 */
1301enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1302 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1303 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1304 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1305 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1306
1307 /* keep last */
1308 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1309};
1310
1311/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001312 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1313 *
1314 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1315 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001316 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1317 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001318 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001319 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1320 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1321 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001322 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1323 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1324 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1325 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001326 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1327 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001328 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001329 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001330 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001331 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001332 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001333 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1334 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001335 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001336 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1337 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001338 *
1339 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1340 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001341 * configured for an HT channel.
1342 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1343 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001344 */
1345struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001346 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001347 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001348
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001349 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001350 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001351
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001352 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1353
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001354 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001355 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001356 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001357};
1358
1359/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001360 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1361 *
1362 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1363 * operation.
1364 *
1365 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1366 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1367 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1368 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001369 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1370 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001371 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1372 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001373 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001374 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1375 */
1376struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1377 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001378 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001379 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001380 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001381 u8 count;
1382};
1383
1384/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001385 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1386 *
1387 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1388 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001389 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1390 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1391 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1392 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001393 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1394 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1395 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1396 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001397 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1398 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1399 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001400 */
1401enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1402 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001403 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001404 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001405 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001406};
1407
1408/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001409 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1410 *
1411 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1412 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1413 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001414 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001415 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1416 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001417 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001418 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1419 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001420 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1421 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1422 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001423 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001424 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1425 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1426 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1427 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001428 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1429 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001430 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1431 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1432 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1433 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1434 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001435 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001436 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001437 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001438 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1439 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001440 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001441 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001442 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001443 */
1444struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001445 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001446 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001447 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001448 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001449 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001450 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001451
1452 u8 cab_queue;
1453 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1454
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001455 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1456
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001457 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1458
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001459 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001460
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001461#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1462 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1463#endif
1464
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001465 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1466
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001467 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001468 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001469};
1470
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001471static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1472{
1473#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001474 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001475#endif
1476 return false;
1477}
1478
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001479/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001480 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1481 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1482 *
1483 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1484 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1485 *
1486 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1487 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1488 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1489 */
1490struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1491
1492/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001493 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1494 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1495 *
1496 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1497 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1498 *
1499 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1500 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1501 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1502 */
1503struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1504
1505/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001506 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1507 *
1508 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1509 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1510 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001511 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1512 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001513 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1514 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001515 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1516 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1517 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001518 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1519 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001520 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001521 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1522 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001523 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001524 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001525 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001526 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1527 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1528 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001529 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1530 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1531 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1532 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1533 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1534 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1535 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001536 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001537 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001538 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001539 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1540 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1541 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001542 */
1543enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001544 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1545 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1546 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1547 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1548 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1549 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1550 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001551 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001552};
1553
1554/**
1555 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1556 *
1557 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1558 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1559 *
1560 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1561 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001562 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001563 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001564 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1565 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001566 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1567 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1568 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001569 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1570 * data block:
1571 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1572 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1573 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001574 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1575 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001576 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001577struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001578 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001579 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001580 u8 icv_len;
1581 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001582 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001583 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001584 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001585 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001586 u8 key[0];
1587};
1588
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001589#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1590
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001591#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1592#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1593
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001594/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001595 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1596 *
1597 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1598 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1599 * reverse order than in packet)
1600 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1601 * reverse order than in packet)
1602 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1603 * reverse order than in packet)
1604 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1605 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001606 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001607 */
1608struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1609 union {
1610 struct {
1611 u32 iv32;
1612 u16 iv16;
1613 } tkip;
1614 struct {
1615 u8 pn[6];
1616 } ccmp;
1617 struct {
1618 u8 pn[6];
1619 } aes_cmac;
1620 struct {
1621 u8 pn[6];
1622 } aes_gmac;
1623 struct {
1624 u8 pn[6];
1625 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001626 struct {
1627 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1628 u8 seq_len;
1629 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001630 };
1631};
1632
1633/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001634 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1635 *
1636 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1637 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1638 *
1639 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1640 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1641 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1642 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1643 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1644 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1645 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1646 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1647 * key_idx value calculation:
1648 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1649 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1650 */
1651struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1652 u32 cipher;
1653 u16 iftype;
1654 u8 hdr_len;
1655 u8 pn_len;
1656 u8 pn_off;
1657 u8 key_idx_off;
1658 u8 key_idx_mask;
1659 u8 key_idx_shift;
1660 u8 mic_len;
1661};
1662
1663/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001664 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1665 *
1666 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1667 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1668 *
1669 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1670 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1671 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001672enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001673 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001674};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001675
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001676/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001677 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1678 *
1679 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1680 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1681 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1682 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1683 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1684 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1685 */
1686enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1687 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1688 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1689 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1690 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1691 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1692 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1693};
1694
1695/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001696 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1697 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1698 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1699 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1700 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1701 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1702 *
1703 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1704 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1705 */
1706enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1707 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1708 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1709 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1710 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1711};
1712
1713/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001714 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1715 *
1716 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001717 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001718 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1719 */
1720struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1721 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1722 struct {
1723 s8 idx;
1724 u8 count;
1725 u8 count_cts;
1726 u8 count_rts;
1727 u16 flags;
1728 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1729};
1730
1731/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001732 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1733 *
1734 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1735 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1736 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1737 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1738 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001739 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001740 *
1741 * @addr: MAC address
1742 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001743 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001744 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1745 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001746 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1747 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1748 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001749 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1750 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001751 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001752 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001753 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001754 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1755 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001756 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001757 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001758 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1759 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1760 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1761 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001762 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001763 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001764 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001765 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1766 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301767 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001768 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1769 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1770 * unlimited.
1771 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. This
1772 * field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. For packets
1773 * with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1774 * + If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1775 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1776 * + If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1777 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1778 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level driver.
1779 * This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001780 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001781 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001782 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001783 */
1784struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001785 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001786 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1787 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001788 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001789 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001790 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001791 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001792 u8 uapsd_queues;
1793 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001794 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001795 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001796 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001797 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001798 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001799 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301800 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001801 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1802 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001803 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001804 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001805
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001806 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1807
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001808 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001809 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001810};
1811
1812/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001813 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1814 *
1815 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301816 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001817 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001818 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1819 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1820 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001821enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001822 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1823};
1824
1825/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001826 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1827 *
1828 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1829 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1830 */
1831struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1832 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1833};
1834
1835/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001836 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1837 *
1838 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1839 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1840 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1841 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001842 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001843 *
1844 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1845 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1846 */
1847struct ieee80211_txq {
1848 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1849 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1850 u8 tid;
1851 u8 ac;
1852
1853 /* must be last */
1854 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1855};
1856
1857/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001858 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1859 *
1860 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1861 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1862 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1863 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1864 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1865 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001866 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1867 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1868 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1869 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1870 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1871 * algorithm.
1872 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1873 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1874 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1875 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1876 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1877 * CCK frames.
1878 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001879 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1880 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1881 * the FCS at the end.
1882 *
1883 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1884 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1885 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1886 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1887 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1888 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001889 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001890 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001891 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1892 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1893 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1894 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1895 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001896 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1897 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1898 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1899 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1900 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001901 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1902 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1903 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301904 *
1905 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1906 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001907 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001908 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1909 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1910 *
1911 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1912 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1913 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1914 *
1915 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1916 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001917 *
1918 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1919 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001920 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301921 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1922 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1923 * the stack.
1924 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001925 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001926 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1927 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001928 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001929 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1930 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1931 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001932 *
1933 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1934 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1935 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1936 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1937 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1938 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001939 *
1940 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1941 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1942 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1943 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1944 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1945 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001946 *
1947 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1948 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1949 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001950 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001951 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1952 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1953 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001954 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001955 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1956 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1957 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1958 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001959 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1960 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1961 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1962 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1963 * supported cipher suites.
1964 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001965 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1966 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1967 * for frames.
1968 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001969 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1970 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1971 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1972 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001973 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001974 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1975 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1976 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001977 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1978 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1979 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001980 *
1981 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1982 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001983 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001984 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1985 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1986 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1987 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001988 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1989 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1990 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1991 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001992 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001993 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1994 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1995 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001996 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001997 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001998 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001999 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2000 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2001 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002002 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2003 * within A-MPDU.
2004 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002005 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2006 * for sent beacons.
2007 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002008 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2009 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2010 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2011 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2012 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002013 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2014 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2015 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2016 * timeout.
2017 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002018 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2019 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2020 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002021 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2022 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2023 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2024 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2025 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2026 *
2027 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2028 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2029 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302030 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2031 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2032 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2033 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2034 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002035 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2036 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2037 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2038 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002039 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002040 */
2041enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002042 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2043 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2044 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2045 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2046 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2047 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2048 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2049 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2050 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2051 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2052 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2053 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2054 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2055 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2056 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2057 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2058 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2059 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2060 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2061 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2062 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2063 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2064 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2065 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2066 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2067 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2068 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2069 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2070 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002071 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002072 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002073 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002074 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002075 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002076 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002077 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2078 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302079 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002080 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002081
2082 /* keep last, obviously */
2083 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002084};
2085
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002086/**
2087 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002088 *
2089 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2090 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2091 *
2092 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2093 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2094 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002095 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2096 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002097 *
2098 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2099 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002100 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2101 * along with this structure.
2102 *
2103 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2104 *
2105 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2106 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2107 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002108 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2109 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002110 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002111 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002112 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002113 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002114 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002115 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002116 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002117 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002118 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2119 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2120 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002121 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2122 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2123 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002124 *
2125 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2126 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002127 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2128 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002129 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2130 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002131 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2132 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002133 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002134 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2135 * can handle.
2136 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2137 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002138 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002139 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002140 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2141 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2142 * aggregation.
2143 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2144 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2145 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002146 *
2147 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002148 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2149 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2150 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2151 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002152 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002153 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2154 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2155 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002156 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2157 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002158 *
2159 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2160 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002161 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002162 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002163 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002164 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2165 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002166 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002167 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002168 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2169 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2170 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2171 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2172 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2173 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2174 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2175 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002176 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002177 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2178 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002179 *
2180 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2181 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2182 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2183 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2184 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2185 * neither enabled.
2186 *
2187 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2188 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2189 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002190 *
2191 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2192 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2193 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002194 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2195 * device.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002196 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002197struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002198 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002199 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002200 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002201 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002202 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002203 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002204 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002205 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002206 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002207 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002208 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002209 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002210 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002211 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002212 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002213 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002214 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002215 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002216 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002217 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002218 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002219 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002220 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002221 struct {
2222 int units_pos;
2223 s16 accuracy;
2224 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002225 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002226 u8 uapsd_queues;
2227 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002228 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2229 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002230 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002231};
2232
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002233static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2234 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2235{
2236 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2237}
2238#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2239
2240static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2241 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2242{
2243 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2244}
2245#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2246
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002247/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002248 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2249 *
2250 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2251 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2252 */
2253struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2254 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2255
2256 /* Keep last */
2257 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2258};
2259
2260/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002261 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2262 *
2263 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2264 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2265 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2266 * @status: channel-switch response status
2267 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2268 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2269 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2270 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2271 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2272 */
2273struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2274 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2275 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2276 u8 action_code;
2277 u32 status;
2278 u32 timestamp;
2279 u16 switch_time;
2280 u16 switch_timeout;
2281 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2282 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2283};
2284
2285/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002286 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2287 *
2288 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2289 *
2290 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2291 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2292 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2293 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2294 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002295 *
2296 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002297 */
2298struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2299
2300/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002301 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2302 *
2303 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2304 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2305 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002306static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2307{
2308 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2309}
2310
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002311/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002312 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002313 *
2314 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2315 * @addr: the address to set
2316 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002317static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002318{
2319 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2320}
2321
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002322static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2323ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002324 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002325{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002326 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002327 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002328 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002329}
2330
2331static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2332ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002333 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002334{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002335 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002336 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002337 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002338}
2339
2340static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2341ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002342 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002343{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002344 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002345 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002346 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002347}
2348
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002349/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002350 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2351 * @hw: the hardware
2352 * @skb: the skb
2353 *
2354 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2355 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2356 */
2357void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2358
2359/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002360 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002361 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002362 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2363 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2364 *
2365 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2366 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002367 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2368 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2369 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002370 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2371 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2372 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002373 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2374 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2375 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2376 *
2377 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2378 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2379 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2380 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2381 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002382 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2383 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2384 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2385 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2386 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002387 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2388 *
2389 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2390 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2391 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2392 * based on the receive flags.
2393 *
2394 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2395 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2396 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2397 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002398 *
2399 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2400 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2401 * handler.
2402 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002403 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002404 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2405 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002406 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002407 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002408 *
2409 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2410 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2411 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002412 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002413
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002414/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002415 * DOC: Powersave support
2416 *
2417 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2418 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002419 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2420 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2421 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2422 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2423 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2424 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2425 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2426 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002427 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002428 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2429 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2430 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002431 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2432 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002433 *
2434 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2435 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2436 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002437 *
2438 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2439 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2440 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2441 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002442 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2443 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002444 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002445 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002446 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2447 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2448 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2449 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2450 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2451 * periods.
2452 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002453 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002454 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2455 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2456 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2457 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2458 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2459 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2460 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2461 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2462 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2463 *
2464 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002465 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002466 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002467 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2468 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2469 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2470 *
2471 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2472 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002473 */
2474
2475/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002476 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2477 *
2478 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002479 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002480 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2481 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2482 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2483 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2484 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2485 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002486 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2487 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002488 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2489 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2490 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2491 *
2492 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2493 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2494 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2495 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2496 *
2497 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2498 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2499 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2500 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002501 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002502 * - a list of information element IDs
2503 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2504 *
2505 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2506 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2507 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2508 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2509 * vendor information elements.
2510 *
2511 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2512 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2513 *
2514 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2515 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2516 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2517 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2518 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2519 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2520 *
2521 *
2522 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2523 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2524 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2525 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2526 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2527 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2528 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2529 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2530 *
2531 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2532 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2533 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002534 */
2535
2536/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002537 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2538 *
2539 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2540 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2541 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2542 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2543 *
2544 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2545 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2546 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2547 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2548 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2549 * hardware flags.
2550 *
2551 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2552 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2553 * turned off otherwise.
2554 *
2555 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2556 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2557 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2558 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2559 */
2560
2561/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002562 * DOC: Frame filtering
2563 *
2564 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2565 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2566 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2567 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2568 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2569 *
2570 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2571 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2572 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2573 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002574 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2575 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2576 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2577 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2578 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2579 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2580 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002581 *
2582 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2583 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2584 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2585 * or dropped.
2586 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002587 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2588 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2589 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2590 * the flag, but not clear it.
2591 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2592 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2593 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2594 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2595 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2596 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2597 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2598 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002599 */
2600
2601/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002602 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2603 *
2604 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2605 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2606 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2607 *
2608 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2609 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2610 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2611 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2612 * the driver code.
2613 *
2614 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2615 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2616 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2617 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2618 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2619 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2620 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2621 *
2622 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2623 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2624 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2625 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2626 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2627 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2628 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2629 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2630 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2631 * @sta_notify callback.
2632 *
2633 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2634 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2635 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2636 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2637 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2638 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2639 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002640 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002641 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2642 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2643 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2644 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2645 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2646 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2647 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002648 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2649 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2650 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002651 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2652 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2653 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2654 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2655 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2656 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2657 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2658 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2659 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2660 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2661 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2662 *
2663 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2664 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2665 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2666 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2667 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2668 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2669 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2670 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2671 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2672 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002673 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002674 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2675 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2676 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2677 *
2678 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2679 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2680 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2681 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2682 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002683 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002684 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2685 *
2686 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2687 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2688 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2689 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002690 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002691 *
2692 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2693 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2694 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2695 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002696 */
2697
2698/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002699 * DOC: HW queue control
2700 *
2701 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2702 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2703 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2704 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2705 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2706 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2707 *
2708 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2709 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2710 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2711 *
2712 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2713 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2714 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2715 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2716 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2717 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2718 * the hardware queue.
2719 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2720 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2721 *
2722 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2723 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2724 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2725 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2726 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2727 *
2728 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2729 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2730 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2731 * off-channel queue: 9
2732 *
2733 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2734 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2735 *
2736 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2737 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2738 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2739 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2740 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2741 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2742 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2743 *
2744 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2745 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2746 *
2747 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2748 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2749 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2750 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2751 */
2752
2753/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002754 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2755 *
2756 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2757 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2758 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2759 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2760 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002761 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2762 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2763 * multicast address.
2764 *
2765 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2766 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2767 *
2768 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2769 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2770 *
2771 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2772 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2773 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2774 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2775 * honour this flag if possible.
2776 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002777 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2778 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002779 *
2780 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002781 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002782 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002783 *
2784 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002785 */
2786enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002787 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2788 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2789 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2790 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2791 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2792 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002793 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002794 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002795};
2796
2797/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002798 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2799 *
2800 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2801 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002802 *
2803 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2804 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002805 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002806 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2807 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002808 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2809 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2810 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002811 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002812 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2813 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2814 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2815 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2816 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2817 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2818 * session is gone and removes the station.
2819 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2820 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2821 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2822 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002823 */
2824enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2825 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2826 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002827 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002828 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2829 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2830 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002831 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002832};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002833
2834/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002835 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2836 *
2837 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2838 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2839 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2840 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2841 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2842 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2843 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2844 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2845 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2846 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2847 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2848 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2849 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2850 */
2851struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2852 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2853 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2854 u16 tid;
2855 u16 ssn;
2856 u8 buf_size;
2857 bool amsdu;
2858 u16 timeout;
2859};
2860
2861/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002862 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2863 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002864 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2865 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002866 */
2867enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2868 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002869 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002870};
2871
2872/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002873 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2874 *
2875 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002876 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2877 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2878 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002879 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002880 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2881 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2882 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002883 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2884 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002885 */
2886enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2887 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2888 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002889 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002890 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002891};
2892
2893/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002894 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2895 *
2896 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2897 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2898 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2899 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2900 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2901 *
2902 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2903 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2904 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2905 */
2906enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2907 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2908 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2909};
2910
2911/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002912 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2913 *
2914 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2915 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2916 *
2917 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2918 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2919 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2920 * of wowlan configuration)
2921 */
2922enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2923 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2924 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2925};
2926
2927/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002928 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2929 *
2930 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2931 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2932 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2933 *
2934 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2935 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2936 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002937 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002938 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002939 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002940 *
2941 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2942 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2943 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2944 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2945 * or zero.
2946 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2947 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2948 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002949 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002950 *
2951 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2952 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2953 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2954 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002955 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2956 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002957 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002958 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002959 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2960 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2961 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2962 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2963 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002964 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2965 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2966 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2967 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002968 *
2969 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2970 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2971 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2972 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2973 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2974 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002975 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2976 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2977 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2978 * in suspend().
2979 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002980 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002981 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002982 * and @stop must be implemented.
2983 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2984 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2985 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2986 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2987 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002988 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002989 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002990 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2991 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2992 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2993 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2994 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2995 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002996 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2997 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2998 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2999 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3000 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3001 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3002 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003003 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003004 *
3005 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3006 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003007 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003008 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003009 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003010 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3011 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3012 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3013 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3014 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003015 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3016 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003017 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003018 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3019 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3020 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3021 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003022 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3023 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003024 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003025 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003026 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3027 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3028 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3029 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3030 * which flags are changed.
3031 * This callback can sleep.
3032 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003033 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003034 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003035 *
3036 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003037 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3038 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003039 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003040 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003041 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003042 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003043 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3044 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3045 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003046 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003047 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003048 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3049 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3050 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3051 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3052 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3053 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003054 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3055 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3056 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003058 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003059 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003060 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3061 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003062 * that power save is disabled.
3063 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3064 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3065 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3066 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3067 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3068 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3069 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003070 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003071 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003072 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3073 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3074 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3075 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3076 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3077 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3078 * The callback can sleep.
3079 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003080 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3081 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3082 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3083 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3084 *
3085 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003086 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003087 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003088 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3089 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003090 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3091 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3092 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003093 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003094 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3095 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3096 * this notification.
3097 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003098 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003099 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3100 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003101 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003102 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003103 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3104 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3105 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003106 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003107 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003108 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003109 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3110 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3111 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003112 * The callback can sleep.
3113 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003114 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003115 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003116 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003117 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3118 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3119 *
3120 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003121 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3122 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3123 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3124 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3125 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003126 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303127 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3128 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003129 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3130 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303131 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003132 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003133 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3134 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3135 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003136 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003137 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3138 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3139 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3140 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003141 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3142 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3143 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3144 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3145 * The callback can sleep.
3146 *
3147 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3148 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3149 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3150 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3151 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003152 * The callback can sleep.
3153 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003154 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3155 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3156 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3157 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3158 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3159 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3160 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003161 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3162 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3163 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003164 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003165 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3166 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3167 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3168 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3169 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3170 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3171 * The callback can sleep.
3172 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003173 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003174 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003175 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003176 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003177 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003178 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003179 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003180 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003181 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003182 *
3183 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003184 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003185 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003186 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003187 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003188 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3189 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3190 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3191 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3192 * The callback can sleep.
3193 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003194 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3195 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3196 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3197 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003198 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003199 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003200 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3201 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3202 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003203 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003204 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003205 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003206 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3207 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3208 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003209 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
Sara Sharonfad47182015-12-08 16:04:34 +02003210 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003211 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003212 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3213 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3214 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3215 * - TX: 1.....7
3216 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3217 * - TX: 8..1...
3218 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3219 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3220 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3221 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3222 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003223 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003224 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003225 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003226 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3227 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003228 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3229 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3230 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003231 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003232 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003233 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3234 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003235 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3236 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3237 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003238 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003239 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3240 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003241 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003242 *
3243 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003244 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3245 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3246 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3247 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003248 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003249 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003250 *
3251 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3252 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3253 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3254 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003255 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003256 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3257 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3258 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3259 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3260 *
3261 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003262 *
3263 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3264 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3265 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3266 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3267 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3268 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003269 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003270 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3271 * must be accepted in this case.
3272 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003273 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3274 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003275 *
3276 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3277 *
3278 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303279 *
3280 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3281 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303282 *
3283 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3284 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3285 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003286 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3287 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003288 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003289 *
3290 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3291 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3292 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3293 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003294 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003295 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3296 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3297 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3298 * more-data bit must always be set.
3299 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3300 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003301 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3302 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3303 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3304 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3305 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3306 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003307 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3308 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3309 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003310 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3311 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003312 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003313 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003314 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003315 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3316 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3317 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003318 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003319 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3320 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3321 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3322 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003323 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003324 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003325 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3326 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3327 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003328 *
3329 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3330 *
3331 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3332 *
3333 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3334 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3335 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003336 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3337 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3338 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3339 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3340 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3341 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3342 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3343 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3344 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3345 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3346 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3347 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003348 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003349 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3350 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3351 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3352 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3353 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3354 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3355 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3356 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3357 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003358 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303359 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003360 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303361 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003362 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3363 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3364 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303365 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003366 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3367 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303368 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003369 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3370 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303371 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003372 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3373 * another, as specified in the list of
3374 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3375 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303376 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003377 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003378 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3379 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3380 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3381 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3382 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3383 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3384 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003385 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003386 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3387 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3388 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3389 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3390 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003391 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003392 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3393 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3394 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003395 *
3396 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3397 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3398 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003399 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003400 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3401 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003402 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003403 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003404 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3405 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003406 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3407 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3408 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3409 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003410 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3411 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3412 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003413 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003414 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3415 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3416 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3417 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003418 *
3419 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3420 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3421 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003422 *
3423 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3424 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003425 *
3426 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3427 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3428 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3429 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3430 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3431 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3432 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3433 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3434 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003435 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3436 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3437 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3438 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3439 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3440 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3441 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003442 *
3443 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003444 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3445 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3446 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3447 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003448 *
3449 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3450 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003451 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3452 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3453 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3454 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3455 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3456 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003457 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3458 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3459 * this call.
3460 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3461 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3462 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003463 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003464struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003465 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3466 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3467 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003468 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003469 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003470#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3471 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3472 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003473 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003474#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003475 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003476 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003477 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3478 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003479 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003480 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003481 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003482 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003483 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3484 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3485 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3486 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003487
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003488 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3489 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3490
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003491 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003492 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003493 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3494 unsigned int changed_flags,
3495 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003496 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003497 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3498 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3499 unsigned int filter_flags,
3500 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003501 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3502 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003503 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003505 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003506 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003507 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3508 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3509 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3510 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003511 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3513 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003514 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003516 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003517 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003518 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003520 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3521 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3522 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003523 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003524 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003525 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003526 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3527 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3528 const u8 *mac_addr);
3529 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3530 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003531 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3532 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003533 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3534 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3535 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003536 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003537 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003538 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3539 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3540 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3541 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303542#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3543 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3544 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3545 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3546 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303547#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003548 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003549 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003550 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3551 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3552 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3553 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003554 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3556 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003557 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3558 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3559 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3560 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003561 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3562 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3563 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003564 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3565 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3566 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3567 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003568 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003570 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003571 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3572 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3573 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003574 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3575 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003576 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003577 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003578 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003579 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003580 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003581 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3582 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003583 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003584 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003585#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003586 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3587 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003588 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3589 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3590 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003591#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003592 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3593 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003594 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003595 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003596 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003597 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3598 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003599
3600 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003601 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003602 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003603 int duration,
3604 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003605 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003606 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3607 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3608 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303609 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303610 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3611 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003612 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3613 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3614 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003615
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003616 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3617 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3618 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3619 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3620 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003621 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3622 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3623 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3624 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3625 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003626
3627 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3628 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3629 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3631 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3632 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3633 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3634 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003635
3636 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3637 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003638
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003639 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3640 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3641
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003642 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3643 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3644 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3645 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3646 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3647 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3648 u32 changed);
3649 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3650 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3651 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3652 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3653 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3654 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003655 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3656 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3657 int n_vifs,
3658 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003659
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003660 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3661 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003662
3663#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3664 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3665 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3666 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3667#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003668 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3669 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3670 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003671 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3672 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3673 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003674
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003675 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3676 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3677
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003678 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3679 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003680 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3681 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003682 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3683 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003684
3685 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3686 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3687 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3688 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003689 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003690 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3691 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3692 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003693 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3694 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3695 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003696
3697 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3698 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003699 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003700
3701 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3702 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3703 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3704 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3705 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003706 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3707 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3708 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003709 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3710 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3711 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3712 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3713 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3714 u8 instance_id);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003715};
3716
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003717/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003718 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3719 *
3720 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3721 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3722 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3723 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3724 * @priv_data_len.
3725 *
3726 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3727 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3728 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3729 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3730 *
3731 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3732 */
3733struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3734 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3735 const char *requested_name);
3736
3737/**
3738 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003739 *
3740 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3741 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3742 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3743 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3744 * @priv_data_len.
3745 *
3746 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3747 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003748 *
3749 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003750 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003751static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003752struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003753 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3754{
3755 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3756}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003757
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003758/**
3759 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3760 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003761 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3762 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3763 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003764 *
3765 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003766 *
3767 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003768 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003769int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3770
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003771/**
3772 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3773 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3774 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3775 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3776 */
3777struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3778 int throughput;
3779 int blink_time;
3780};
3781
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003782/**
3783 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3784 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3785 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3786 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3787 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3788 */
3789enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3790 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3791 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3792 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3793};
3794
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003795#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003796const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3797const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3798const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3799const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3800const char *
3801__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3802 unsigned int flags,
3803 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3804 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003805#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003806/**
3807 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3808 *
3809 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3810 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3811 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3812 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3813 *
3814 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003815 *
3816 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003817 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003818static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003819{
3820#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3821 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3822#else
3823 return NULL;
3824#endif
3825}
3826
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003827/**
3828 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3829 *
3830 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3831 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3832 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3833 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3834 *
3835 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003836 *
3837 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003838 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003839static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003840{
3841#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3842 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3843#else
3844 return NULL;
3845#endif
3846}
3847
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003848/**
3849 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3850 *
3851 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3852 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3853 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3854 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3855 *
3856 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003857 *
3858 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003859 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003860static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003861{
3862#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3863 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3864#else
3865 return NULL;
3866#endif
3867}
3868
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003869/**
3870 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3871 *
3872 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3873 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3874 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3875 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3876 *
3877 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003878 *
3879 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003880 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003881static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003882{
3883#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3884 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3885#else
3886 return NULL;
3887#endif
3888}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003889
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003890/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003891 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3892 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003893 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003894 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3895 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3896 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003897 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3898 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3899 *
3900 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003901 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003902static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003903ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003904 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3905 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3906{
3907#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003908 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003909 blink_table_len);
3910#else
3911 return NULL;
3912#endif
3913}
3914
3915/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003916 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3917 *
3918 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3919 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3920 *
3921 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3922 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003923void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3924
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003925/**
3926 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3927 *
3928 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3929 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003930 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003931 *
3932 * @hw: the hardware to free
3933 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003934void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3935
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003936/**
3937 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3938 *
3939 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3940 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3941 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3942 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3943 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3944 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3945 *
3946 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3947 */
3948void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3949
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003950/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003951 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003952 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003953 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3954 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3955 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3956 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3957 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3958 *
3959 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3960 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3961 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3962 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3963 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3964 *
3965 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3966 *
3967 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003968 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003969 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3970 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003971 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003972void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3973 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003974
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003975/**
3976 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3977 *
3978 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003979 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3980 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3981 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3982 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003983 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003984 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003985 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3986 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003987 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3988 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003989 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003990 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003991 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003992 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3993 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003994 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003995static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3996{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03003997 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003998}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003999
4000/**
4001 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4002 *
4003 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004004 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4005 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004006 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004007 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4008 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004009 *
4010 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4011 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004012 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004013void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004014
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004015/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004016 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4017 *
4018 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4019 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4020 *
4021 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004022 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4023 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004024 *
4025 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4026 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4027 */
4028static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4029 struct sk_buff *skb)
4030{
4031 local_bh_disable();
4032 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4033 local_bh_enable();
4034}
4035
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004036/**
4037 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4038 *
4039 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4040 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4041 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4042 *
4043 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4044 *
4045 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4046 * each other.
4047 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004048 * @sta: currently connected sta
4049 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004050 *
4051 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004052 */
4053int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4054
4055/**
4056 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4057 * (in process context)
4058 *
4059 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4060 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4061 * applies.
4062 *
4063 * @sta: currently connected sta
4064 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004065 *
4066 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004067 */
4068static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4069 bool start)
4070{
4071 int ret;
4072
4073 local_bh_disable();
4074 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4075 local_bh_enable();
4076
4077 return ret;
4078}
4079
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004080/**
4081 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4082 * @sta: currently connected station
4083 *
4084 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4085 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4086 * connected station was received.
4087 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4088 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4089 * be serialized.
4090 */
4091void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4092
4093/**
4094 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4095 * @sta: currently connected station
4096 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4097 *
4098 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4099 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4100 * from a connected station was received.
4101 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4102 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4103 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004104 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4105 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4106 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4107 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004108 */
4109void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4110
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004111/*
4112 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4113 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4114 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02004115#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004116
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004117/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004118 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004119 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004120 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4121 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004122 *
4123 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004124 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4125 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004126 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004127 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4128 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4129 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4130 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4131 *
4132 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4133 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4134 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4135 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4136 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4137 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4138 *
4139 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4140 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4141 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4142 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4143 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004144 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004145void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4146 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004147
4148/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004149 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4150 *
4151 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4152 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4153 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4154 *
4155 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4156 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4157 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4158 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4159 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4160 */
4161void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4162 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4163 struct sk_buff *skb,
4164 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4165 int max_rates);
4166
4167/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004168 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4169 *
4170 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4171 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4172 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4173 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004174 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4175 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004176 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004177 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4178 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004179 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004180 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4181 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004182 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004183void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004184 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004185
4186/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004187 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4188 *
4189 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4190 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4191 * specific skbs.
4192 *
4193 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4194 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4195 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4196 *
4197 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4198 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4199 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4200 * @info: tx status information
4201 */
4202void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4203 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4204 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4205
4206/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004207 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4208 *
4209 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4210 *
4211 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4212 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4213 * for a single hardware.
4214 *
4215 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4216 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4217 */
4218static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4219 struct sk_buff *skb)
4220{
4221 local_bh_disable();
4222 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4223 local_bh_enable();
4224}
4225
4226/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004227 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004228 *
4229 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4230 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4231 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004232 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4233 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004234 *
4235 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4236 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004237 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004238void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004239 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004240
4241/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004242 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4243 *
4244 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4245 * connected STA.
4246 *
4247 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4248 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4249 */
4250void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4251
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004252#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4253
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004254/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004255 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4256 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4257 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004258 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4259 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4260 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004261 */
4262struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4263 u16 tim_offset;
4264 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004265
4266 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004267};
4268
4269/**
4270 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4271 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4272 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4273 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4274 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4275 *
4276 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4277 * obtain the beacon template.
4278 *
4279 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4280 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004281 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4282 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004283 *
4284 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4285 *
4286 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4287 */
4288struct sk_buff *
4289ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4290 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4291 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4292
4293/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004294 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4295 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004296 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004297 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4298 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4299 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4300 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4301 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4302 *
4303 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004304 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004305 *
4306 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4307 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004308 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4309 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004310 *
4311 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004312 *
4313 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004314 */
4315struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4316 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4317 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4318
4319/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004320 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4321 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004322 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004323 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004324 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004325 *
4326 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004327 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004328static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4329 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4330{
4331 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4332}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004333
4334/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004335 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4336 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4337 *
4338 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4339 * This function is called implicitly when
4340 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4341 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4342 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4343 *
4344 * Return: new csa counter value
4345 */
4346u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4347
4348/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004349 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4350 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4351 *
4352 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004353 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004354 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4355 */
4356void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4357
4358/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004359 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004360 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4361 *
4362 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4363 */
4364bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4365
4366
4367/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004368 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4369 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4370 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4371 *
4372 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4373 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4374 *
4375 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004376 *
4377 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004378 */
4379struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4380 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4381
4382/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004383 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4384 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4385 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4386 *
4387 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4388 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4389 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4390 *
4391 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4392 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004393 *
4394 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004395 */
4396struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4397 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4398
4399/**
4400 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4401 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4402 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4403 *
4404 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4405 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4406 * BSSID and address is used.
4407 *
4408 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4409 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004410 *
4411 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004412 */
4413struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4414 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4415
4416/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004417 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4418 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004419 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004420 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4421 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004422 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004423 *
4424 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4425 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004426 *
4427 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004428 */
4429struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004430 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004431 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004432 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004433
4434/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004435 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4436 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004437 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004438 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4439 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004440 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004441 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4442 *
4443 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4444 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4445 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4446 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4447 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004448void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004449 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004450 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004451 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4452
4453/**
4454 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4455 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004456 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004457 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004458 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004459 *
4460 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4461 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4462 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004463 *
4464 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004465 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004466__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4467 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004468 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004469
4470/**
4471 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4472 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004473 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004474 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4475 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004476 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004477 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4478 *
4479 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4480 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4481 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4482 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4483 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004484void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4485 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004486 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004487 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004488 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4489
4490/**
4491 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4492 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004493 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004494 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004495 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004496 *
4497 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4498 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4499 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004500 *
4501 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004502 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004503__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004505 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004506 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004507
4508/**
4509 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4510 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004511 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004512 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004513 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004514 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004515 *
4516 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4517 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004518 *
4519 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004520 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004521__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4522 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004523 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004524 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004525 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004526
4527/**
4528 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4529 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004530 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004531 *
4532 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4533 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4534 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4535 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004536 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4537 *
4538 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4539 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004540 *
4541 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4542 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4543 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4544 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4545 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4546 * use common code for all beacons.
4547 */
4548struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004549ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004550
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004551/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004552 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4553 *
4554 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4555 *
4556 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4557 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4558 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4559 */
4560void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4561 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4562
4563/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004564 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004565 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004566 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4567 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004568 *
4569 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004570 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4571 * with this P1K
4572 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004573 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004574static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4575 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4576{
4577 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4578 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4579 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4580
4581 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4582}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004583
4584/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004585 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4586 *
4587 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4588 * and transmitter address.
4589 *
4590 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4591 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4592 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4593 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4594 */
4595void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4596 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4597
4598/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004599 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4600 *
4601 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4602 * in the packet.
4603 *
4604 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4605 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4606 * encrypted with this key
4607 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4608 */
4609void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4610 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004611
4612/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004613 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4614 *
4615 * @pos: start of crypto header
4616 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4617 * @pn: PN to add
4618 *
4619 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4620 * the packet payload)
4621 *
4622 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4623 * point to the crypto header)
4624 */
4625u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4626
4627/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004628 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4629 *
4630 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004631 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004632 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4633 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4634 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4635 *
4636 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4637 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4638 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4639 *
4640 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4641 * can be done concurrently.
4642 */
4643void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4644 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4645
4646/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004647 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4648 *
4649 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004650 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004651 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4652 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4653 * @seq: new sequence data
4654 *
4655 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4656 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4657 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4658 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4659 *
4660 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4661 * can be done concurrently.
4662 */
4663void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4664 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4665
4666/**
4667 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4668 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4669 *
4670 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4671 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4672 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4673 *
4674 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4675 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4676 */
4677void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4678
4679/**
4680 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4681 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4682 * @keyconf: new key data
4683 *
4684 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4685 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4686 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4687 *
4688 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4689 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4690 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4691 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4692 *
4693 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4694 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4695 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4696 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4697 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4698 * of the reconfiguration.
4699 *
4700 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4701 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4702 *
4703 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4704 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4705 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4706 * the key that's being replaced.
4707 */
4708struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4709ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4710 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4711
4712/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004713 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4714 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4715 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4716 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4717 * @gfp: allocation flags
4718 */
4719void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4720 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4721
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004722/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004723 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4724 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4725 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4726 *
4727 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4728 */
4729void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4730
4731/**
4732 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4733 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4734 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4735 *
4736 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4737 */
4738void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4739
4740/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004741 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4742 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4743 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4744 *
4745 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004746 *
4747 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004748 */
4749
4750int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4751
4752/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004753 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4754 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4755 *
4756 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4757 */
4758void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4759
4760/**
4761 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4762 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4763 *
4764 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4765 */
4766void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4767
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004768/**
4769 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4770 *
4771 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4772 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004773 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4774 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004775 *
4776 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004777 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004778 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03004779void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4780 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004781
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004782/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004783 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4784 *
4785 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4786 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4787 *
4788 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4789 */
4790void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4791
4792/**
4793 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4794 *
4795 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4796 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4797 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4798 * while associating, for instance.
4799 *
4800 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4801 */
4802void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4803
4804/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004805 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4806 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4807 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4808 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4809 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4810 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4811 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4812 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004813 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004814 */
4815enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4816 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4817 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004818 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004819};
4820
4821/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004822 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4823 *
4824 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4825 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4826 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4827 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4828 *
4829 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4830 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4831 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4832 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4833 */
4834void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4835 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4836 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4837 void *data);
4838
4839/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004840 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004841 *
4842 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4843 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004844 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4845 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4846 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004847 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004848 *
4849 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004850 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004851 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004852 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4853 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004854static inline void
4855ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4856 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4857 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4858 void *data)
4859{
4860 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4861 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4862 iterator, data);
4863}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004864
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004865/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004866 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4867 *
4868 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4869 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4870 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4871 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004872 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004873 *
4874 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004875 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004876 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4877 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4878 */
4879void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004880 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004881 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4882 u8 *mac,
4883 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4884 void *data);
4885
4886/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004887 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4888 *
4889 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4890 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4891 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4892 *
4893 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4894 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4895 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4896 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4897 */
4898void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4899 u32 iter_flags,
4900 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4901 u8 *mac,
4902 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4903 void *data);
4904
4905/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004906 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4907 *
4908 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4909 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4910 * function for them.
4911 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4912 *
4913 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4914 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4915 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4916 */
4917void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4918 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4919 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4920 void *data);
4921/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004922 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4923 *
4924 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4925 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4926 *
4927 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4928 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4929 */
4930void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4931
4932/**
4933 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4934 *
4935 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4936 * workqueue.
4937 *
4938 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4939 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4940 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4941 */
4942void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4943 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4944 unsigned long delay);
4945
4946/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004947 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004948 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004949 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304950 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004951 *
4952 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004953 *
4954 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4955 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4956 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4957 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304958int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4959 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004960
4961/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004962 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004963 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004964 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4965 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4966 *
4967 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004968 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4969 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004970 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004971void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004972 u16 tid);
4973
4974/**
4975 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004976 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004977 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004978 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004979 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004980 *
4981 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4982 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4983 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4984 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004985int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004986
4987/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004988 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004989 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004990 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4991 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4992 *
4993 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004994 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4995 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004996 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004997void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004998 u16 tid);
4999
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005000/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005001 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5002 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005003 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005004 * @addr: station's address
5005 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005006 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5007 *
5008 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005009 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5010 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005011struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005012 const u8 *addr);
5013
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005014/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005015 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005016 *
5017 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005018 * @addr: remote station's address
5019 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005020 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005021 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5022 *
5023 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005024 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5025 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005026 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5027 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5028 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5029 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5030 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5031 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5032 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005033 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005034 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005035 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005036struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5037 const u8 *addr,
5038 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005039
5040/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005041 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5042 * @hw: the hardware
5043 * @pubsta: the station
5044 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5045 *
5046 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5047 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5048 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5049 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5050 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5051 *
5052 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5053 * manner.
5054 *
5055 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5056 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5057 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5058 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5059 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5060 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5061 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5062 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5063 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5064 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5065 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5066 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5067 * woke up while blocked or not.
5068 */
5069void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5070 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5071
5072/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005073 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5074 * @pubsta: the station
5075 *
5076 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5077 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5078 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5079 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5080 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005081 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5082 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5083 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5084 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5085 *
5086 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5087 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5088 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5089 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005090 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005091void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005092
5093/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005094 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5095 * @pubsta: the station
5096 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5097 *
5098 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5099 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5100 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5101 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5102 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5103 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5104 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5105 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5106 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5107 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5108 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5109 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5110 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5111 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5112 */
5113void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5114
5115/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005116 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5117 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5118 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5119 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5120 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5121 *
5122 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5123 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5124 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5125 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5126 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5127 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005128 *
5129 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5130 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5131 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005132 */
5133void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5134 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5135 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5136 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5137 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5138 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5139 void *data),
5140 void *iter_data);
5141
5142/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005143 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5144 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5145 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5146 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5147 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5148 *
5149 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5150 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5151 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5152 * in removal process will be skipped.
5153 *
5154 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5155 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5156 */
5157void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5158 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5159 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5160 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5161 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5162 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5163 void *data),
5164 void *iter_data);
5165
5166/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005167 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5168 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5169 * @iter: iterator function
5170 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5171 *
5172 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5173 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5174 * places while calling into the driver.
5175 *
5176 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5177 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5178 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005179 *
5180 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5181 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5182 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5183 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005184 */
5185void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5186 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5187 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5188 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5189 void *data),
5190 void *iter_data);
5191
5192/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005193 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5194 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5195 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5196 *
5197 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5198 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5199 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5200 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5201 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005202 * %NULL.
5203 *
5204 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005205 */
5206struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5207 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5208
5209/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005210 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5211 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005212 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005213 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005214 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005215 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005216 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5217 */
5218void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005219
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005220/**
5221 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5222 *
5223 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5224 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005225 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005226 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5227 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005228 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5229 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005230 *
5231 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5232 * without connection recovery attempts.
5233 */
5234void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5235
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005236/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005237 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5238 *
5239 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5240 *
5241 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5242 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5243 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5244 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5245 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5246 *
5247 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5248 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5249 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5250 * disconnect normally later.
5251 *
5252 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5253 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5254 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5255 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5256 */
5257void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5258
5259/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005260 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5261 * rssi threshold triggered
5262 *
5263 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5264 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5265 * @gfp: context flags
5266 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005267 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005268 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5269 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5270 */
5271void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5272 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5273 gfp_t gfp);
5274
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005275/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005276 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5277 *
5278 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5279 * @gfp: context flags
5280 */
5281void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5282
5283/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005284 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5285 *
5286 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5287 */
5288void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5289
5290/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005291 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5292 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5293 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5294 *
5295 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5296 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5297 */
5298void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5299
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005300/**
5301 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5302 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005303 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005304 *
5305 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5306 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5307 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5308 */
5309void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5310 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5311
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005312/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005313 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5314 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5315 */
5316void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5317
5318/**
5319 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5320 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5321 */
5322void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5323
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005324/**
5325 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5326 *
5327 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5328 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5329 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5330 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5331 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5332 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5333 *
5334 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5335 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5336 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5337 */
5338void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5339 const u8 *addr);
5340
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005341/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005342 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5343 * @pubsta: station struct
5344 * @tid: the session's TID
5345 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5346 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5347 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5348 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5349 *
5350 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5351 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5352 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5353 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5354 */
5355void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5356 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5357 u16 received_mpdus);
5358
5359/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005360 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5361 *
5362 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5363 * buffer.
5364 *
5365 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5366 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5367 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5368 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5369 */
5370void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5371
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005372/**
5373 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5374 *
5375 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5376 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5377 * reordering.
5378 *
5379 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5380 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5381 *
5382 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5383 * @addr: station mac address
5384 * @tid: the rx tid
5385 */
5386void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5387 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5388
5389/**
5390 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5391 *
5392 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5393 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5394 * reordering.
5395 *
5396 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5397 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5398 *
5399 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5400 * @addr: station mac address
5401 * @tid: the rx tid
5402 */
5403void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5404 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5405
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005406/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005407
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005408/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005409 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005410 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005411 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5412 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5413 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005414 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5415 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005416 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5417 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5418 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5419 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5420 * RTS threshold
5421 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5422 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005423 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005424 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5425 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005426 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005427 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005428 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005429 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005430struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5431 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5432 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5433 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5434 struct sk_buff *skb;
5435 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5436 bool rts, short_preamble;
5437 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005438 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005439 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005440 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005441};
5442
5443struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005444 const char *name;
5445 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005446 void (*free)(void *priv);
5447
5448 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5449 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005450 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005451 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305452 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005453 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005454 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5455 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005456 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5457 void *priv_sta);
5458
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005459 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5460 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5461 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5462 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005463 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5464 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5465 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005466 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5467 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005468
5469 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5470 struct dentry *dir);
5471 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005472
5473 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005474};
5475
5476static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005477 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005478 int index)
5479{
5480 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5481}
5482
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005483/**
5484 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5485 *
5486 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5487 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5488 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5489 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5490 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5491 * not null.
5492 *
5493 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5494 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5495 *
5496 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5497 * that this may be null.
5498 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5499 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5500 */
5501bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5502 void *priv_sta,
5503 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5504
5505
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005506static inline s8
5507rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5508 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5509{
5510 int i;
5511
5512 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5513 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5514 return i;
5515
5516 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005517 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005518
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005519 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005520 return 0;
5521}
5522
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005523static inline
5524bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5525 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5526{
5527 unsigned int i;
5528
5529 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5530 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5531 return true;
5532 return false;
5533}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005534
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005535/**
5536 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5537 *
5538 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5539 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5540 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5541 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5542 *
5543 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5544 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5545 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5546 */
5547int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5548 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5549 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5550
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005551int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5552void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005553
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005554static inline bool
5555conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5556{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005557 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005558}
5559
5560static inline bool
5561conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5562{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005563 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5564 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005565}
5566
5567static inline bool
5568conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5569{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005570 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5571 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005572}
5573
5574static inline bool
5575conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5576{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005577 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005578}
5579
5580static inline bool
5581conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5582{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005583 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5584 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5585 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005586}
5587
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005588static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5589ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5590{
5591 if (p2p) {
5592 switch (type) {
5593 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5594 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5595 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5596 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5597 default:
5598 break;
5599 }
5600 }
5601 return type;
5602}
5603
5604static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5605ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5606{
5607 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5608}
5609
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005610/**
5611 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5612 *
5613 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5614 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5615 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5616 *
5617 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5618 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5619 * matching GroupId management frame.
5620 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5621 */
5622void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5623 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5624
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005625void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5626 int rssi_min_thold,
5627 int rssi_max_thold);
5628
5629void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005630
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005631/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005632 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005633 *
5634 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5635 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005636 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5637 *
5638 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5639 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005640 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005641int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5642
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005643/**
5644 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5645 * @vif: virtual interface
5646 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5647 * @gfp: allocation flags
5648 *
5649 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5650 */
5651void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5652 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5653 gfp_t gfp);
5654
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005655/**
5656 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5657 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5658 * @vif: virtual interface
5659 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5660 * @band: the band to transmit on
5661 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5662 *
5663 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5664 */
5665bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5666 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5667 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5668
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005669/**
5670 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5671 *
5672 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5673 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5674 *
5675 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5676 *
5677 * private:
5678 *
5679 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5680 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5681 */
5682struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5683 u32 next_tsf;
5684 bool has_next_tsf;
5685
5686 u8 absent;
5687
5688 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5689 struct {
5690 u32 start;
5691 u32 duration;
5692 u32 interval;
5693 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5694};
5695
5696/**
5697 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5698 *
5699 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5700 * @data: NoA tracking data
5701 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5702 *
5703 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5704 */
5705int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5706 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5707
5708/**
5709 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5710 *
5711 * @data: NoA tracking data
5712 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5713 */
5714void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5715
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005716/**
5717 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5718 * @vif: virtual interface
5719 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5720 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5721 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5722 * @gfp: allocation flags
5723 *
5724 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5725 */
5726void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5727 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5728 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005729
5730/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005731 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5732 *
5733 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5734 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5735 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5736 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5737 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5738 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5739 *
5740 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5741 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5742 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5743 *
5744 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5745 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5746 *
5747 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5748 */
5749int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5750
5751/**
5752 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5753 *
5754 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5755 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5756 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5757 *
5758 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5759 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5760 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5761 *
5762 * @sta: the station
5763 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5764 */
5765void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5766
5767/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005768 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5769 *
5770 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5771 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5772 *
5773 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5774 */
5775struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5776 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005777
5778/**
5779 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5780 *
5781 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5782 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5783 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5784 *
5785 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5786 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5787 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5788 */
5789void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5790 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5791 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03005792
5793/**
5794 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5795 *
5796 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5797 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5798 *
5799 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5800 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5801 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5802 * @gfp: allocation flags
5803 */
5804void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5805 u8 inst_id,
5806 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5807 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03005808
5809/**
5810 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5811 *
5812 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5813 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5814 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5815 *
5816 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5817 * @match: match event information
5818 * @gfp: allocation flags
5819 */
5820void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5821 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5822 gfp_t gfp);
5823
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005824#endif /* MAC80211_H */